electra1000 hw guide
DESCRIPTION
Harmonic Electra 1000 Hardware GuideTRANSCRIPT
DiviComtrade Electra 1000tradeMultichannel Encoder
Installation Guide
Rev E
Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Disclaimer
Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute a binding offer for sale of the product described herein Harmonic assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of the products described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic The use and purchase of this product do not convey a license under any patent rights copyrights trademark rights or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic Nothing hereunder constitutes a representation or warranty that using any products in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third parties
Trademark Acknowledgments
Harmonic and all Harmonic product names are trademarks of Harmonic Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Compliance and Approval
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 Subpart B of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment
This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy It may cause harmful interference to radio communications if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions in this manual Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference If this occurs the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) this device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation
Connections between the Harmonic equipment and other equipment must be made in a manner that is consistent with maintaining compliance with FCC radio frequency emission limits Modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Harmonic may void the authority granted to the user by the FCC to operate this equipment
WEEERoHS Compliance Policy
Harmonic Inc intends to comply fully with the European Unionrsquos Directive 200296EC as amended by Directive 2003108EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment also known as ldquoWEEErdquo and Directive 200295EC as amended on the Restriction of use of Hazardous Substances also known as ldquoRoHSrdquo
Harmonic will ensure that product which cannot be reused will be recycled in compliance with the WEEE Directive To that end users are advised that (1) Harmonic equipment is not to be discarded in household or office garbage (2) Harmonic Inc will pay the freight for shipment of equipment to be disposed of if it is returned to Harmonic (3) customers should call the normal RMA telephone numbers to arrange for such shipment and (4) for additional and updated information on this process customers may consult the Harmonic website httpharmonicinccomah_weee_recyclecfm
Harmonic will ensure that its products will be either reused or recycled in compliance with the WEEE Directive For the latest information concerning Harmonicrsquos WEEERoHS Compliance Policy and its Recycling and Take-Back process please visit our web site
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
产品中的有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量表 Names and Contents of the Toxic and Hazardous Substances or Elements in the Products if the Part is Present
该表显示哈雷公司产品中可能含有的有毒有害物质元配件的信息除了来源于元配件供应商的物料成分资料 亦来自其它相关的机构与资料哈雷产品不一定使用这些元配件This table shows those components where hazardous substances may be found in Harmonic products based on among other things material content information provided by third party suppliers These components may or may not be part of the product
除非特殊注明哈雷公司产品的环保使用期限 均为 20 年该环保使用期限的有效条件为必须遵循该产品使用手册的规定对该产品进行使用或存储The Environmental Protective Use Period for Harmonic products is 20 years unless displayed otherwise on the product The EPUP period is valid only when the products are operated or stored as per the conditions specified in the product manual
O 表示在该部件的所有均质材料中此类有毒有害物质的含量均小于 SJT11363-2006 标准所规定的限量
O Indicates the content of the toxic and hazardous substances at the homogeneous material level of the parts is below the limit defined in SJT11363 2006 standard
X 表示至少在该部件的某一均质材料中此类有毒有害物质的含量超出 SJT11363-2006 标准规定的限量
X Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substances in at least one of the homogeneous materials of the parts is above the limit defined in SJT11363 2006 standard
部件名称 (Part name)有毒有害物质或元素 (Hazardous Substance)
铅(PB)
汞(Hg)
镉(Cd)
六价铬(CrVI)
多溴联苯(PBB)
多溴二苯醚(PBDE)
印刷线路板 (Printed Circuit Assemblies)
X O O O O O
机械组件 (Mechanical Subassemblies)
X O O O O O
光学组件 (Optical Subassemblies)
X O O O O O
电源 (Power Supplies)
X O O O O O
缆线 线束 (Cables harnesses)
X O O O O O
屏幕 显示器 (Screens Monitors)
X O O O O O
金属零件 (Metal Parts)
O O O O O O
塑料 发泡材料 (Plastics foams)
O O O O O O
电池 (Batteries)
X O O O O O
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Standards and Agency Approval
The following tables list regulatory standards and agency approvals
North America
Europe
Japan
Australia and New Zealand
Standards Agency Approval
EMI FCC Part 15 Subpart B ICES-003 Issue 2 Class A FCC
Safety UL 60950 CSA 60950 cTUV-us Mark
Standards Agency Approval
EMIEMC EN55022 Class A EN55024 CE
Safety EN 60950 TUV-GS-Mark CE
Standards Agency Approval
EMI VCCI V-3 200004 VCCI
Standards Agency Approval
EMI ASNZS-3548 1995 +A1 1997 +A2 1997 NA
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Documentation ConventionsThis manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information The following symbols appear throughout this manual
DANGER The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
CAUTION The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can adversely affect the performance of your Harmonic product or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult
LASER DANGER The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in this product that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
NOTE The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need or it may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances
TIP The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a given procedure but which if followed might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier smoother or more efficient
In addition to these symbols this manual uses the following text conventions
Data Entry indicates text you enter at the keyboard
User Interface indicates a button to click a menu item to select or a key or key sequence to press
Screen Output shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a computer screen
Bold indicates the definition of a new term
Italics used for emphasis cross-references and hyperlinked cross-references in online documents
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 6 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Preface11 Manual Organization 9
Chapter 2 Introduction21 Operating Environment 1022 General Features 1023 Video Encoding Features 1224 Audio Encoding Features 1325 DiviTrackIP 20 Support 1426 Digital Program Insertion Support 1427 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC 1428 Closed Captions Support 15
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support 15282 ARIB B-37 Captions 15
29 Front Panel 15291 Front Bezel 15292 Local Control Panel 15293 LEDs 16294 Modes of Operation 16
210 Back Panel 172101 AC Power and Fuse 172102 DC Power and Fuse 172103 Audio Input Ports 172104 Video Input Ports 182105 IP Output Port 192106 Ethernet Management Port 192107 Fault Relay Port 192108 Serial Data Port 19
211 Back Panel LEDs 192111 Main Board LEDs 202112 Video Lock LEDs 202113 Audio Port LEDs 20
Chapter 3 Installation31 Preparation 2132 Unpacking 2133 Installing the Encoder in a Rack 21
331 Rack Guidelines 22332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing 22333 Airflow 22334 Attaching the Rack Rails 23335 Mounting the Encoder 24
34 Installing Encoder Software 24
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 7 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder 25351 Back Panel 25352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables 25353 Connecting the Video Input Cables 26354 Connecting the IP Output Cables 26355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable 26356 Connecting the AC Power 26357 Connecting the DC Power Supply 27
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager 2842 Using the Front Panel 28
421 The Keypad 28422 Front Panel Display 29423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties 29424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address 30425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number 30426 Using Configuration Manager 31
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting51 Air Filters 34
511 Maintaining the Air Filters 34512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters 35
52 Fuse 36521 Replacing the Fuse 36
53 Contacting Harmonic Support 36
Appendix A Encoder SpecificationsA1 Environment Specifications 38A2 Port Specifications 39A3 Port Pinouts 40
A31 Ethernet Management Port 40A32 Fault Relay Port 41A33 Analog Audio Input Ports 41A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning 42
Appendix B Audio and Video SpecificationsB1 AIC Features 43B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio 45B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio 45B4 Video Specifications 47
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot LocationsC1 Module Slots 48
C11 FLEX Module Options 49
Appendix D Boot SequenceD1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup 50
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Disclaimer
Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute a binding offer for sale of the product described herein Harmonic assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of the products described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic The use and purchase of this product do not convey a license under any patent rights copyrights trademark rights or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic Nothing hereunder constitutes a representation or warranty that using any products in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third parties
Trademark Acknowledgments
Harmonic and all Harmonic product names are trademarks of Harmonic Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Compliance and Approval
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 Subpart B of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment
This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy It may cause harmful interference to radio communications if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions in this manual Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference If this occurs the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) this device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation
Connections between the Harmonic equipment and other equipment must be made in a manner that is consistent with maintaining compliance with FCC radio frequency emission limits Modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Harmonic may void the authority granted to the user by the FCC to operate this equipment
WEEERoHS Compliance Policy
Harmonic Inc intends to comply fully with the European Unionrsquos Directive 200296EC as amended by Directive 2003108EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment also known as ldquoWEEErdquo and Directive 200295EC as amended on the Restriction of use of Hazardous Substances also known as ldquoRoHSrdquo
Harmonic will ensure that product which cannot be reused will be recycled in compliance with the WEEE Directive To that end users are advised that (1) Harmonic equipment is not to be discarded in household or office garbage (2) Harmonic Inc will pay the freight for shipment of equipment to be disposed of if it is returned to Harmonic (3) customers should call the normal RMA telephone numbers to arrange for such shipment and (4) for additional and updated information on this process customers may consult the Harmonic website httpharmonicinccomah_weee_recyclecfm
Harmonic will ensure that its products will be either reused or recycled in compliance with the WEEE Directive For the latest information concerning Harmonicrsquos WEEERoHS Compliance Policy and its Recycling and Take-Back process please visit our web site
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
产品中的有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量表 Names and Contents of the Toxic and Hazardous Substances or Elements in the Products if the Part is Present
该表显示哈雷公司产品中可能含有的有毒有害物质元配件的信息除了来源于元配件供应商的物料成分资料 亦来自其它相关的机构与资料哈雷产品不一定使用这些元配件This table shows those components where hazardous substances may be found in Harmonic products based on among other things material content information provided by third party suppliers These components may or may not be part of the product
除非特殊注明哈雷公司产品的环保使用期限 均为 20 年该环保使用期限的有效条件为必须遵循该产品使用手册的规定对该产品进行使用或存储The Environmental Protective Use Period for Harmonic products is 20 years unless displayed otherwise on the product The EPUP period is valid only when the products are operated or stored as per the conditions specified in the product manual
O 表示在该部件的所有均质材料中此类有毒有害物质的含量均小于 SJT11363-2006 标准所规定的限量
O Indicates the content of the toxic and hazardous substances at the homogeneous material level of the parts is below the limit defined in SJT11363 2006 standard
X 表示至少在该部件的某一均质材料中此类有毒有害物质的含量超出 SJT11363-2006 标准规定的限量
X Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substances in at least one of the homogeneous materials of the parts is above the limit defined in SJT11363 2006 standard
部件名称 (Part name)有毒有害物质或元素 (Hazardous Substance)
铅(PB)
汞(Hg)
镉(Cd)
六价铬(CrVI)
多溴联苯(PBB)
多溴二苯醚(PBDE)
印刷线路板 (Printed Circuit Assemblies)
X O O O O O
机械组件 (Mechanical Subassemblies)
X O O O O O
光学组件 (Optical Subassemblies)
X O O O O O
电源 (Power Supplies)
X O O O O O
缆线 线束 (Cables harnesses)
X O O O O O
屏幕 显示器 (Screens Monitors)
X O O O O O
金属零件 (Metal Parts)
O O O O O O
塑料 发泡材料 (Plastics foams)
O O O O O O
电池 (Batteries)
X O O O O O
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Standards and Agency Approval
The following tables list regulatory standards and agency approvals
North America
Europe
Japan
Australia and New Zealand
Standards Agency Approval
EMI FCC Part 15 Subpart B ICES-003 Issue 2 Class A FCC
Safety UL 60950 CSA 60950 cTUV-us Mark
Standards Agency Approval
EMIEMC EN55022 Class A EN55024 CE
Safety EN 60950 TUV-GS-Mark CE
Standards Agency Approval
EMI VCCI V-3 200004 VCCI
Standards Agency Approval
EMI ASNZS-3548 1995 +A1 1997 +A2 1997 NA
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Documentation ConventionsThis manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information The following symbols appear throughout this manual
DANGER The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
CAUTION The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can adversely affect the performance of your Harmonic product or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult
LASER DANGER The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in this product that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
NOTE The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need or it may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances
TIP The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a given procedure but which if followed might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier smoother or more efficient
In addition to these symbols this manual uses the following text conventions
Data Entry indicates text you enter at the keyboard
User Interface indicates a button to click a menu item to select or a key or key sequence to press
Screen Output shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a computer screen
Bold indicates the definition of a new term
Italics used for emphasis cross-references and hyperlinked cross-references in online documents
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 6 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Preface11 Manual Organization 9
Chapter 2 Introduction21 Operating Environment 1022 General Features 1023 Video Encoding Features 1224 Audio Encoding Features 1325 DiviTrackIP 20 Support 1426 Digital Program Insertion Support 1427 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC 1428 Closed Captions Support 15
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support 15282 ARIB B-37 Captions 15
29 Front Panel 15291 Front Bezel 15292 Local Control Panel 15293 LEDs 16294 Modes of Operation 16
210 Back Panel 172101 AC Power and Fuse 172102 DC Power and Fuse 172103 Audio Input Ports 172104 Video Input Ports 182105 IP Output Port 192106 Ethernet Management Port 192107 Fault Relay Port 192108 Serial Data Port 19
211 Back Panel LEDs 192111 Main Board LEDs 202112 Video Lock LEDs 202113 Audio Port LEDs 20
Chapter 3 Installation31 Preparation 2132 Unpacking 2133 Installing the Encoder in a Rack 21
331 Rack Guidelines 22332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing 22333 Airflow 22334 Attaching the Rack Rails 23335 Mounting the Encoder 24
34 Installing Encoder Software 24
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 7 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder 25351 Back Panel 25352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables 25353 Connecting the Video Input Cables 26354 Connecting the IP Output Cables 26355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable 26356 Connecting the AC Power 26357 Connecting the DC Power Supply 27
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager 2842 Using the Front Panel 28
421 The Keypad 28422 Front Panel Display 29423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties 29424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address 30425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number 30426 Using Configuration Manager 31
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting51 Air Filters 34
511 Maintaining the Air Filters 34512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters 35
52 Fuse 36521 Replacing the Fuse 36
53 Contacting Harmonic Support 36
Appendix A Encoder SpecificationsA1 Environment Specifications 38A2 Port Specifications 39A3 Port Pinouts 40
A31 Ethernet Management Port 40A32 Fault Relay Port 41A33 Analog Audio Input Ports 41A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning 42
Appendix B Audio and Video SpecificationsB1 AIC Features 43B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio 45B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio 45B4 Video Specifications 47
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot LocationsC1 Module Slots 48
C11 FLEX Module Options 49
Appendix D Boot SequenceD1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup 50
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
产品中的有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量表 Names and Contents of the Toxic and Hazardous Substances or Elements in the Products if the Part is Present
该表显示哈雷公司产品中可能含有的有毒有害物质元配件的信息除了来源于元配件供应商的物料成分资料 亦来自其它相关的机构与资料哈雷产品不一定使用这些元配件This table shows those components where hazardous substances may be found in Harmonic products based on among other things material content information provided by third party suppliers These components may or may not be part of the product
除非特殊注明哈雷公司产品的环保使用期限 均为 20 年该环保使用期限的有效条件为必须遵循该产品使用手册的规定对该产品进行使用或存储The Environmental Protective Use Period for Harmonic products is 20 years unless displayed otherwise on the product The EPUP period is valid only when the products are operated or stored as per the conditions specified in the product manual
O 表示在该部件的所有均质材料中此类有毒有害物质的含量均小于 SJT11363-2006 标准所规定的限量
O Indicates the content of the toxic and hazardous substances at the homogeneous material level of the parts is below the limit defined in SJT11363 2006 standard
X 表示至少在该部件的某一均质材料中此类有毒有害物质的含量超出 SJT11363-2006 标准规定的限量
X Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substances in at least one of the homogeneous materials of the parts is above the limit defined in SJT11363 2006 standard
部件名称 (Part name)有毒有害物质或元素 (Hazardous Substance)
铅(PB)
汞(Hg)
镉(Cd)
六价铬(CrVI)
多溴联苯(PBB)
多溴二苯醚(PBDE)
印刷线路板 (Printed Circuit Assemblies)
X O O O O O
机械组件 (Mechanical Subassemblies)
X O O O O O
光学组件 (Optical Subassemblies)
X O O O O O
电源 (Power Supplies)
X O O O O O
缆线 线束 (Cables harnesses)
X O O O O O
屏幕 显示器 (Screens Monitors)
X O O O O O
金属零件 (Metal Parts)
O O O O O O
塑料 发泡材料 (Plastics foams)
O O O O O O
电池 (Batteries)
X O O O O O
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Standards and Agency Approval
The following tables list regulatory standards and agency approvals
North America
Europe
Japan
Australia and New Zealand
Standards Agency Approval
EMI FCC Part 15 Subpart B ICES-003 Issue 2 Class A FCC
Safety UL 60950 CSA 60950 cTUV-us Mark
Standards Agency Approval
EMIEMC EN55022 Class A EN55024 CE
Safety EN 60950 TUV-GS-Mark CE
Standards Agency Approval
EMI VCCI V-3 200004 VCCI
Standards Agency Approval
EMI ASNZS-3548 1995 +A1 1997 +A2 1997 NA
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Documentation ConventionsThis manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information The following symbols appear throughout this manual
DANGER The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
CAUTION The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can adversely affect the performance of your Harmonic product or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult
LASER DANGER The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in this product that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
NOTE The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need or it may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances
TIP The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a given procedure but which if followed might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier smoother or more efficient
In addition to these symbols this manual uses the following text conventions
Data Entry indicates text you enter at the keyboard
User Interface indicates a button to click a menu item to select or a key or key sequence to press
Screen Output shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a computer screen
Bold indicates the definition of a new term
Italics used for emphasis cross-references and hyperlinked cross-references in online documents
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 6 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Preface11 Manual Organization 9
Chapter 2 Introduction21 Operating Environment 1022 General Features 1023 Video Encoding Features 1224 Audio Encoding Features 1325 DiviTrackIP 20 Support 1426 Digital Program Insertion Support 1427 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC 1428 Closed Captions Support 15
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support 15282 ARIB B-37 Captions 15
29 Front Panel 15291 Front Bezel 15292 Local Control Panel 15293 LEDs 16294 Modes of Operation 16
210 Back Panel 172101 AC Power and Fuse 172102 DC Power and Fuse 172103 Audio Input Ports 172104 Video Input Ports 182105 IP Output Port 192106 Ethernet Management Port 192107 Fault Relay Port 192108 Serial Data Port 19
211 Back Panel LEDs 192111 Main Board LEDs 202112 Video Lock LEDs 202113 Audio Port LEDs 20
Chapter 3 Installation31 Preparation 2132 Unpacking 2133 Installing the Encoder in a Rack 21
331 Rack Guidelines 22332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing 22333 Airflow 22334 Attaching the Rack Rails 23335 Mounting the Encoder 24
34 Installing Encoder Software 24
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 7 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder 25351 Back Panel 25352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables 25353 Connecting the Video Input Cables 26354 Connecting the IP Output Cables 26355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable 26356 Connecting the AC Power 26357 Connecting the DC Power Supply 27
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager 2842 Using the Front Panel 28
421 The Keypad 28422 Front Panel Display 29423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties 29424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address 30425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number 30426 Using Configuration Manager 31
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting51 Air Filters 34
511 Maintaining the Air Filters 34512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters 35
52 Fuse 36521 Replacing the Fuse 36
53 Contacting Harmonic Support 36
Appendix A Encoder SpecificationsA1 Environment Specifications 38A2 Port Specifications 39A3 Port Pinouts 40
A31 Ethernet Management Port 40A32 Fault Relay Port 41A33 Analog Audio Input Ports 41A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning 42
Appendix B Audio and Video SpecificationsB1 AIC Features 43B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio 45B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio 45B4 Video Specifications 47
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot LocationsC1 Module Slots 48
C11 FLEX Module Options 49
Appendix D Boot SequenceD1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup 50
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Standards and Agency Approval
The following tables list regulatory standards and agency approvals
North America
Europe
Japan
Australia and New Zealand
Standards Agency Approval
EMI FCC Part 15 Subpart B ICES-003 Issue 2 Class A FCC
Safety UL 60950 CSA 60950 cTUV-us Mark
Standards Agency Approval
EMIEMC EN55022 Class A EN55024 CE
Safety EN 60950 TUV-GS-Mark CE
Standards Agency Approval
EMI VCCI V-3 200004 VCCI
Standards Agency Approval
EMI ASNZS-3548 1995 +A1 1997 +A2 1997 NA
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Documentation ConventionsThis manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information The following symbols appear throughout this manual
DANGER The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
CAUTION The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can adversely affect the performance of your Harmonic product or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult
LASER DANGER The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in this product that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
NOTE The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need or it may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances
TIP The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a given procedure but which if followed might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier smoother or more efficient
In addition to these symbols this manual uses the following text conventions
Data Entry indicates text you enter at the keyboard
User Interface indicates a button to click a menu item to select or a key or key sequence to press
Screen Output shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a computer screen
Bold indicates the definition of a new term
Italics used for emphasis cross-references and hyperlinked cross-references in online documents
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 6 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Preface11 Manual Organization 9
Chapter 2 Introduction21 Operating Environment 1022 General Features 1023 Video Encoding Features 1224 Audio Encoding Features 1325 DiviTrackIP 20 Support 1426 Digital Program Insertion Support 1427 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC 1428 Closed Captions Support 15
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support 15282 ARIB B-37 Captions 15
29 Front Panel 15291 Front Bezel 15292 Local Control Panel 15293 LEDs 16294 Modes of Operation 16
210 Back Panel 172101 AC Power and Fuse 172102 DC Power and Fuse 172103 Audio Input Ports 172104 Video Input Ports 182105 IP Output Port 192106 Ethernet Management Port 192107 Fault Relay Port 192108 Serial Data Port 19
211 Back Panel LEDs 192111 Main Board LEDs 202112 Video Lock LEDs 202113 Audio Port LEDs 20
Chapter 3 Installation31 Preparation 2132 Unpacking 2133 Installing the Encoder in a Rack 21
331 Rack Guidelines 22332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing 22333 Airflow 22334 Attaching the Rack Rails 23335 Mounting the Encoder 24
34 Installing Encoder Software 24
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 7 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder 25351 Back Panel 25352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables 25353 Connecting the Video Input Cables 26354 Connecting the IP Output Cables 26355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable 26356 Connecting the AC Power 26357 Connecting the DC Power Supply 27
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager 2842 Using the Front Panel 28
421 The Keypad 28422 Front Panel Display 29423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties 29424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address 30425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number 30426 Using Configuration Manager 31
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting51 Air Filters 34
511 Maintaining the Air Filters 34512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters 35
52 Fuse 36521 Replacing the Fuse 36
53 Contacting Harmonic Support 36
Appendix A Encoder SpecificationsA1 Environment Specifications 38A2 Port Specifications 39A3 Port Pinouts 40
A31 Ethernet Management Port 40A32 Fault Relay Port 41A33 Analog Audio Input Ports 41A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning 42
Appendix B Audio and Video SpecificationsB1 AIC Features 43B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio 45B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio 45B4 Video Specifications 47
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot LocationsC1 Module Slots 48
C11 FLEX Module Options 49
Appendix D Boot SequenceD1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup 50
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved
Documentation ConventionsThis manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information The following symbols appear throughout this manual
DANGER The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
CAUTION The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that if ignored can adversely affect the performance of your Harmonic product or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult
LASER DANGER The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in this product that if ignored can cause physical harm to you
NOTE The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need or it may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances
TIP The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a given procedure but which if followed might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier smoother or more efficient
In addition to these symbols this manual uses the following text conventions
Data Entry indicates text you enter at the keyboard
User Interface indicates a button to click a menu item to select or a key or key sequence to press
Screen Output shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a computer screen
Bold indicates the definition of a new term
Italics used for emphasis cross-references and hyperlinked cross-references in online documents
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 6 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Preface11 Manual Organization 9
Chapter 2 Introduction21 Operating Environment 1022 General Features 1023 Video Encoding Features 1224 Audio Encoding Features 1325 DiviTrackIP 20 Support 1426 Digital Program Insertion Support 1427 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC 1428 Closed Captions Support 15
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support 15282 ARIB B-37 Captions 15
29 Front Panel 15291 Front Bezel 15292 Local Control Panel 15293 LEDs 16294 Modes of Operation 16
210 Back Panel 172101 AC Power and Fuse 172102 DC Power and Fuse 172103 Audio Input Ports 172104 Video Input Ports 182105 IP Output Port 192106 Ethernet Management Port 192107 Fault Relay Port 192108 Serial Data Port 19
211 Back Panel LEDs 192111 Main Board LEDs 202112 Video Lock LEDs 202113 Audio Port LEDs 20
Chapter 3 Installation31 Preparation 2132 Unpacking 2133 Installing the Encoder in a Rack 21
331 Rack Guidelines 22332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing 22333 Airflow 22334 Attaching the Rack Rails 23335 Mounting the Encoder 24
34 Installing Encoder Software 24
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 7 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder 25351 Back Panel 25352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables 25353 Connecting the Video Input Cables 26354 Connecting the IP Output Cables 26355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable 26356 Connecting the AC Power 26357 Connecting the DC Power Supply 27
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager 2842 Using the Front Panel 28
421 The Keypad 28422 Front Panel Display 29423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties 29424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address 30425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number 30426 Using Configuration Manager 31
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting51 Air Filters 34
511 Maintaining the Air Filters 34512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters 35
52 Fuse 36521 Replacing the Fuse 36
53 Contacting Harmonic Support 36
Appendix A Encoder SpecificationsA1 Environment Specifications 38A2 Port Specifications 39A3 Port Pinouts 40
A31 Ethernet Management Port 40A32 Fault Relay Port 41A33 Analog Audio Input Ports 41A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning 42
Appendix B Audio and Video SpecificationsB1 AIC Features 43B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio 45B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio 45B4 Video Specifications 47
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot LocationsC1 Module Slots 48
C11 FLEX Module Options 49
Appendix D Boot SequenceD1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup 50
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 6 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Preface11 Manual Organization 9
Chapter 2 Introduction21 Operating Environment 1022 General Features 1023 Video Encoding Features 1224 Audio Encoding Features 1325 DiviTrackIP 20 Support 1426 Digital Program Insertion Support 1427 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC 1428 Closed Captions Support 15
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support 15282 ARIB B-37 Captions 15
29 Front Panel 15291 Front Bezel 15292 Local Control Panel 15293 LEDs 16294 Modes of Operation 16
210 Back Panel 172101 AC Power and Fuse 172102 DC Power and Fuse 172103 Audio Input Ports 172104 Video Input Ports 182105 IP Output Port 192106 Ethernet Management Port 192107 Fault Relay Port 192108 Serial Data Port 19
211 Back Panel LEDs 192111 Main Board LEDs 202112 Video Lock LEDs 202113 Audio Port LEDs 20
Chapter 3 Installation31 Preparation 2132 Unpacking 2133 Installing the Encoder in a Rack 21
331 Rack Guidelines 22332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing 22333 Airflow 22334 Attaching the Rack Rails 23335 Mounting the Encoder 24
34 Installing Encoder Software 24
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 7 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder 25351 Back Panel 25352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables 25353 Connecting the Video Input Cables 26354 Connecting the IP Output Cables 26355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable 26356 Connecting the AC Power 26357 Connecting the DC Power Supply 27
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager 2842 Using the Front Panel 28
421 The Keypad 28422 Front Panel Display 29423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties 29424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address 30425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number 30426 Using Configuration Manager 31
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting51 Air Filters 34
511 Maintaining the Air Filters 34512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters 35
52 Fuse 36521 Replacing the Fuse 36
53 Contacting Harmonic Support 36
Appendix A Encoder SpecificationsA1 Environment Specifications 38A2 Port Specifications 39A3 Port Pinouts 40
A31 Ethernet Management Port 40A32 Fault Relay Port 41A33 Analog Audio Input Ports 41A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning 42
Appendix B Audio and Video SpecificationsB1 AIC Features 43B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio 45B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio 45B4 Video Specifications 47
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot LocationsC1 Module Slots 48
C11 FLEX Module Options 49
Appendix D Boot SequenceD1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup 50
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 7 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder 25351 Back Panel 25352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables 25353 Connecting the Video Input Cables 26354 Connecting the IP Output Cables 26355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable 26356 Connecting the AC Power 26357 Connecting the DC Power Supply 27
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager 2842 Using the Front Panel 28
421 The Keypad 28422 Front Panel Display 29423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties 29424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address 30425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number 30426 Using Configuration Manager 31
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting51 Air Filters 34
511 Maintaining the Air Filters 34512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters 35
52 Fuse 36521 Replacing the Fuse 36
53 Contacting Harmonic Support 36
Appendix A Encoder SpecificationsA1 Environment Specifications 38A2 Port Specifications 39A3 Port Pinouts 40
A31 Ethernet Management Port 40A32 Fault Relay Port 41A33 Analog Audio Input Ports 41A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning 42
Appendix B Audio and Video SpecificationsB1 AIC Features 43B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio 45B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio 45B4 Video Specifications 47
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot LocationsC1 Module Slots 48
C11 FLEX Module Options 49
Appendix D Boot SequenceD1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup 50
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Table of Contents
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 8 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages 50D21 Resetting the Encoder 50D22 Loading New Software 51
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power SupplyE1 Getting Started 52E2 Power Source Specifications 52E3 Overcurrent Protection 52E4 Wiring Requirements 53E5 Power Connector 53E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable 54
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding ModuleF1 Introduction 55F2 Video Encoding Specifications 55F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications 56F4 Ancillary Data Specifications 56F5 Input Specifications 57F6 Output Specifications 58F7 Environmental and Physical 58F8 Module Slots 58F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module 58
F91 Installing a Module 59F10 Cabling the FLEX Module 59F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios 60
F111 2 - Channel 60F112 4 - Channel 61
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX 62
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input CardG1 RF Specifications 63G2 Output Specifications 64G3 Environmental and Physical 64
Index 65
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 9 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 1Preface
This manual describes the Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder
11 Manual OrganizationThis manual contains the following chapters
Chapter 2 Introduction introduces the encoder and describes its features
Chapter 3 Installation provides a hardware overview including a description of the back panel ports connector specifications and rack-mounting instructions
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder describes how to begin configuring the encoder using NMX or the front panel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting describes maintenance and what to do in the event of problems
Appendix A Encoder Specifications describes specifications and physical characteristics of the back panel ports and port pinouts environment specifications and input and output specifications
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications provides specifications for AICand video encoding
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations shows the numbering of the back panel slots NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Appendix D Boot Sequence describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the front panel
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply provides specifications for the optional DC power supply and wiring instructions
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module provides details about the DiviCom FLEX decoding module
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card provides specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 10 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 2Introduction
The Harmonic DiviComtrade Electratrade 1000 Multichannel Encoder provides multichannel standard definition MPEG-2 encoding and DiviTrackIPtrade statistical multiplexing It accepts up to four analog composite or serial digital standard definition video inputs and up to ten analog or digital audio inputs The encoder operates within an IP environment allowing flexible network architectures
This chapter describes
The environment in which you can operate the DiviCom Electra 1000
General features
Video encoding features
Audio encoding features
Support for DiviTrackIP and DPI
The front and back panels
21 Operating EnvironmentThe encoder operates under the control of NMXtrade Digital Service Manager NMX manages multiple DiviCom Electra 1000 encoders and other devices NMX provides full configuration of the DiviCom Electra 1000 platform ports services and PSI as well as alarm management You configure a few initial network settings from the front panel of the encoder The encoder operates within an IP environment therefore encoders and multiplexers do not need to be in the same physical location Harmonic recommends discussing your planned network architecture with a Harmonic representative before implementation
22 General Features Table 2-1 describes general features supported by the Electra 1000 See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table 2-1 General Features
Feature Description
Hardware
Chassis Compact 1-RU Mounts in Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard rack
Local control panel Two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) 24-button keypad (includes Help key) Four status LEDs
Software
Control NMX Digital Service Manager Stand Alone GUI (SAG) Front control panel (for setting management IP address)
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction General Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 11 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Upgrades From NMX (see the NMX online help for details)
Video input Up to four video encoders per chassis Accepts 525-line (NTSC) and 625-line (PAL) standard serial
digital and analog composite video in the same chassis 525-line analog may be either NTSC or PAL-M
Accepts 525-line serial digital video Video input deblocking (input preprocessing and filtering)
Audio input Digital and analog stereo inputs Up to 10 stereo pairs Up to 20 mono channels using a single PID per channel with
MPEG-1 Layer II compression Complete embedded audio extraction of eight pairs from four
groups from serial digital video input (48 kHz synchronous to video only)
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digitala (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
AAC and HE AACb stereo compression optional Transcoding of Dolby-E into Dolby Digital 51 with backup from
PCM plus simultaneous 20 encoding from PCM into AC3 on onboard AIC board
Transcoding of Dolby into Dolby Digital (51 plus 20) AHC-561 Dolby-E decode (51 (20) Only port 1 is capable of
Multichannel (32) on the AHC-561 or AHC-RAC
IP output MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP One 101001000 Base-T port with second redundant
channelconnector Dual-mode IP output or manual channel switch for redundancy Hotwarm standalone IP channel redundancy Same-source IP output support Automatic port redundancy UDP encapsulation support Unicast and multicast address support Ping and ARP support Single-program transport stream (SPTS) and multiple-program
transport stream (MPTS) outputs Null packets can be preserved to match the exact rate of SPTS
(video server integration) Connector type RJ-45
DPI support SCTE104 SCTE104 messaging for 525-compatibility
PSI support Generated by NMX when managed by NMX
Alarms Current and history alarm logs in NMX Alarm Manager SNMP alarm forwarding
a Dolby AC-3 and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Table 2-1 General Features continued
Feature Description
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction Video Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 12 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
23 Video Encoding Features Table 2-2 describes video encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-2 Video Encoding Features
Feature Support
Input format Serial digital or analog composite
Video format Serial digital 525-lines (NTSC) or 625-lines (PAL)Analog composite NTSC PAL and PAL-M
Encoding mode MPEG-2 MPML 420 encoding
Repeat field detection
Supported
Horizontal resolutions
720 704 640 544 528 480 352
Advanced encoding Alternate scan mode zig-zag mode flexible GOP structure 43 and 169 aspect ratio
Video preprocessing
Closed captioning
VBR
Accommodates poor quality video sources
To compensate for poor analog sources the encoder preprocesses the area around the line sync slightly expanding both the front and back porches to enhance timing recovery As a result the encoder slightly reduces the line length When this capability is engaged all alarm reporting is disabled
VANC Support for
b HE AAC also known as aacPlus was developed by Coding Technologies (httpwwwcodingtechnologiescom) and is a trademark of Coding Technologies Trademarks of Coding Technologies GmbH are the property of Dolby LaboratoriesAll rights reserved
ENRGYtrade Integrated Noise Reduction System Horizontal filter border processing nonlinear spatial filter
impulse noise reduction motion compensated temporal low pass filter (MCTF) luma and chroma filter and edge-adaptive texture filter
DiviCom Line 21 ATSC Line 21 CEA-608 ITU-R BO1294 DVS-157 (GI CC) SCTE 20 (True DVS-157) SAUD (SA CC) DMV1 (Tandberg CC) DVS-157+SAUD Extend Data Services (XDS) ITU-R B01294 CC with Subtitles amp DVS-157 CC DVS-157+SAUD CC
Support for variable bit rate encoding Capped VBR (open loop)
SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction Audio Encoding Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 13 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
24 Audio Encoding Features Table 2-3 describes audio encoding features supported by the encoder
Table 2-3 Audio Encoding Features
Feature Support
Stereo pairs
Input format
Analog reference level specification
Reference levels in the range -10 dBu to +4 dBu may be specified in 05 dBu steps Alignment tone at reference level is placed at -20 dBFS per SMPTE RP155
Audio encoding format
24 bit audio sampling resolution
Supported
THD+noise 00032 measured at ndash3bBFS
Audio sampling frequency
Up to 48 kHz
Input adapter gain structure
Tied to standards and industry practice
Compliant VBV Disable function supported for the audio-video buffer verifier to allow larger buffer size
Single PID per channel
Up to 10 stereo pairs Two stereo pairs per audio input card
Digital AES3 or SPDIF Analog balanced or unbalanced
MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby Digital (AC-3) 20 (stereo) compression and Dolby Digital (20 or 51) passthrough (digital input only embedded audio not supported)
Analog and digital Single channel dual stereo and joint stereo Single PID per channel support with MPEG-1 Layer II
Supported for MPEG-2 Layer II audio compression Allows two audio circuits per adapter port for up to 20 mono
channels
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction DiviTrackIP Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 14 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
25 DiviTrackIP Support DiviTrackIP statistical multiplexing provides high-performance video compression when multiple channels share a specified bandwidth The system maintains the overall pool bandwidth at a constant bit rate while allocating to individual channels the optimum number of bits on a frame-by-frame basis driven by picture complexity information from the LookAheadtrade analysis By assigning priorities you can specify channels that must maintain a high quality when stress on the system increases
NOTE DiviTrackIP is not supported on BNG multiplexers
The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder works in conjunction with NMX and a ProStreamtrade 1000 to support DiviTrackIP The ProStream 1000 analyzes the complexity of all incoming video streams and sends messages to the encoders through the IP network All streams from an DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder must be sent to the same ProStream 1000
Table 2-4 provides DiviTrack IP pool specifications See the NMX help for information about configuring DiviTrackIP pools
Table 2-4 DiviTrackIP Pool Specifications
Parameter Description
Maximum number of DiviTrackIP pools per ProStream 1000
8
Maximum number of VBR services 128
Maximum number of channels per pool 64
Minimum stream bit rate 300 Kbps
Maximum stream bit rate MPEG 2 encoders 15 MbitsSD AVC encoders 8 MbitsHD AVC encoders 18 Mbits
26 Digital Program Insertion Support The DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder supports digital program insertion (DPI) DiviCom Electra 1000 accepts external automation system DPI commands (triggers) via Ethernet These commands are sent via the SCTE 104 protocol and result in the encoder placing SCTE 35 DPI messages in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream (TS) (The DiviCom Electra 1000 also accepts commands via the SCTE DVS525 draft protocol)
The resulting messages carry metadata used by downstream content insertion equipment to choose and insert the proper content When using an external automation system that system provides the metadata values via the SCTE 104 commands The metadata is included in the resulting SCTE 35 messages which are placed in the outgoing MPEG Transport Stream
27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANCThe Electra 1000 (with AHC boards mounted) can support one 51 channel AAC audio stream plus one stereo audio stream maximum per encoder Changes in the audio coding may be controlled through messages in VANC when the AHC is suitably provisioned
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction Closed Captions Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 15 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
28 Closed Captions SupportThe CEA-708608 captions include space for CEA-608 data and that the encoder can receive them either via serial port (SMPTE 333M compliant one service per chassis) or in VANC (SMPTE 334-1 compliant one service per encoder mounted) SMPTE 2010 - SCTE 104 in VANC is also supported
These captions are placed into the video elementary stream per either ATSC or North American DBS methods
281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions SupportThe Electra 7000 provides support for Japanese standard captions as well as the existing support for CEA-708 captions via SMPTE 333 and SMPTE 334-1 inputs The Electra 7000 encoder supports the closed-caption feature where the closed-caption data is generated within the ancillary data space and is extracted by the encoder for processing The Vertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC) packets adhere to the ARIB STD-B37 standard (Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets)
282 ARIB B-37 CaptionsThis refers to the Japanese standard and the input is in VANC while the captions are placed in a separate PID
29 Front Panel Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder
Figure 2-1 Front panel
291 Front Bezel The encoder has a detachable front bezel that snaps on top of the local control panel and provides access to the reusable air filters See 51 Air Filters on page 34 for information about cleaning the air filters
292 Local Control Panel The local control panel allows configuration of the initial network settings for the encoder From the front panel you can set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway and view the encoder MAC address
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 16 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
293 LEDs The four LEDs on the front panel indicate the operational state of the encoder Table 2-5 describes the front panel LEDs
Table 2-5 Front Panel LEDs
LED Color Description
Power Yellow The Power LED is yellow while the encoder initializes after startup
Green The Power LED turns green when the encoder initialization is complete and the management interface is enabled and ready
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm
Local Yellow The Local LED lights when the encoder is operating in local mode
Activity Yellow The Activity LED lights when the encoder generates an MPEG-2 transport stream It blinks slowly when MPEG packets are being transmitted steadily It blinks fast or intermittently when the transmission rate is slow or intermittent
294 Modes of OperationThere are three modes of operation on the encoder and are set globally through the NMX interface for all encoder platforms and locally on SAG as well
Default Mode
Verbose Front Panel Mode
NMX Control Over Second Line
2941 Default Mode
The default mode (with no provision from the NMX application) is the default mode For more information on the default mode refer to the NMX online help
2942 Verbose Front Panel
The front panel displays the device name on line one and either the card number or Broadcast Operations Control (BOC) as well as the (sliding) service name on the second line For more information on the verbose front panel refer to the NMX online help
2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
Under this option you can the front panel classic display mode as well as channel name and bitrate For more information on the NMX control on the second line refer to the NMX online help
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 17 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
210 Back Panel The back panel contains the following elements as shown in Figure 2-2
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
NOTE Refer to Table C-1 on page 48 for information on which cardsmodules are supported in your back panel
Figure 2-2 Back panel
2101 AC Power and Fuse The AC power plug accommodates standard IEC 120 VAC and 250 VAC power cords The chassis does not have a power switch The unit powers on automatically when you plug it in
See 356 Connecting the AC Power on page 26 for cabling instructions
The fuse panel is located beside the power plug The encoder requires one slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm See 52 Fuse on page 36 for replacement instructions
2102 DC Power and Fuse If your encoder includes the optional DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply for more information about the power supply
2103 Audio Input Ports Each AIC has two stereo analog audio input ports and two digital audio input ports (BNC connectors) The encoder supports up to five AICs
Figure 2-3 illustrates the audio input ports on an AIC
AC power plug and fuse or DC power supply
Up to ten stereo digital and analog audio input ports (two stereo digital audio input ports per AIC)
Up to four video input ports Video lock LEDs Fault relay port Fault and Locator LEDs
Serial data input port (reserved for future use)
One 10100 Base-T Ethernet management port
One 101001000 Base-T Fast Ethernet output port with second redundant channel and connector
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 2
Digital Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 1
Analog Audio Input Port 2
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 18 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure 2-3 Audio input ports
21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
Two Phoenixtrade 1881480 6-pin connector ports support balanced or unbalanced stereo analog audio input to the AIC
The connector that mates to the analog ports is a Phoenix 1881367 connector See A33 Analog Audio Input Ports on page 41 for pinout information
21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
Two BNC ports support AES3 or SPDIF to provide the stereo digital audio input to the AIC module
2104 Video Input Ports The back panel contains up to four video input ports These are BNC coaxial ports that support standard definition serial digital video input or composite format
Each video input port connects internally to a video processing card (VPC) The video processing cards are not visible from the encoder back panel
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 19 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
See 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions
2105 IP Output Port One 1001000 Base-T Ethernet port provides two redundant IP output channels The two RJ-45 connectors are labeled GbE PRI and BKUP
The IP output port supports manual redundancy The port also supports hotwarm standalone redundancy when the primary IP data channel detects a cable disconnection the primary channel stops outputting and the backup channel takes over
In manual redundancy you can enable one channel or both channels If you enable one channel you must manually switch to the other channel after a service-affecting alarm If you enable both channels the encoder outputs the same data from both channels
See 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables on page 26 for cabling instructions Set the IP address and other network information for the IP output ports using NMX
2106 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port labeled ETH is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP cable to connect to an Ethernet network See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions See A31 Ethernet Management Port on page 40 for pinout information
2107 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 amps at 30 VDC See A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41 for port pinout and additional information
The encoder energizes the fault relay during normal operation The fault condition is indicated in the same way as the encoderrsquos powered-off condition which is with the relay de-energized You can use this method to correctly identify a power supply failure or loss of input power The signals are normally open or normally closed
NOTE Any alarm causes the fault relay to change to the fault state When multiple alarms accumulate all alarms must be active for the relay state to change
2108 Serial Data Port The serial data port may be supported at some future time
211 Back Panel LEDs The following sections describe the back panel LEDs and their functions
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 2 Introduction Back Panel LEDs
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 20 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
2111 Main Board LEDsThe back panel contains two LEDs on the main board Table 2-6 describes the LEDs located on the main board
Table 2-6 Rear Panel Main Board LEDs
LED Color Description
Locator Blue The Locator LED lights when this encoder is enabled through NMX Use the Locator LED to help you identify a specific chassis in a rack
Fault Red The Fault LED lights when the application software detects an alarm The front panel and back panel Fault LEDs light at the same time
2112 Video Lock LEDs Each video port has an associated Video Lock LED Table 2-7 describes the LED located on each video port
Table 2-7 Rear Panel Video Lock LEDs
LED Color Description
Video 1Video 2
Green When illuminated and steady the Video Lock LED indicates that the video signal is locked When off the Video Lock LED indicates that the encoder has lost video sync
2113 Audio Port LEDs Each AIC contains a status LED Table 2-8 describes the LED located on each AIC
Table 2-8 Rear Panel Audio Port LEDs
LED Color Description
STAT Blue The Audio Port LED is on during bootup as the audio input card comes online The LED is off during normal operation
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 21 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 3Installation
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing a DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder in a standard 19-inch rack and connecting cables
The chapter describes
How to prepare and unpack the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to install the encoder in a rack
How to update the encoder software
How to connect the cables
31 PreparationYou need a Phillips screwdriver to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack Harmonic ships the necessary rack-mount screws and rack rails
32 Unpacking The encoder comes in a specially designed shipping container that ensures the integrity of your encoder hardware during shipping and handling To avoid damage to the component follow the unpacking instructions that come with the encoder
When you unpack the encoder you should find the following items
Encoder
Standard IEC power cord
Spare air filters
Software warranty agreement
Harmonic ships rack-mounting kits in a separate shipping container
33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack You can install the encoder in different sizes and types of racks For rack assembly instructions consult the manual that came with the rack or the customer service department of the rack manufacturer
This section describes how to mount the encoder in a standard 19-inch rack using the two side-mount rails included in the rack-mounting kit A 30-inch-deep rack with a spacer or chimney between racks with multiple encoders is the recommended rack setup However these rails work for racks that are 30 to 36 inches deep
When you view the rack from the rear the power rail should be installed on the left side
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 22 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
331 Rack GuidelinesWhen operating the encoder in the rack ensure that
The ambient temperature around the unit (which may be higher than room temperature) is within the limit specified for the unit
There is sufficient airflow around the unit
Electrical circuits are not overloaded consider the nameplate rating of all the connected equipment
There is overcurrent protection
The equipment is properly grounded
No objects are placed on top of the unit
332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
CAUTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack
If the rack will hold a number of units load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack
ATTENTION Pour eacuteviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opeacuterations de montage ou de reacuteparation de cette uniteacute en casier il convient de prendre des preacutecautions speacuteciales afin de maintenir la stabiliteacute du systegraveme Les directives ci-dessous sont destineacutees agrave assurer la protection du personnel
Si cette uniteacute constitue la seule uniteacute monteacutee en casier elle doit ecirctre placeacutee dans le bas
Si cette uniteacute est monteacutee dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placcedilant lrsquoeacuteleacutement le plus lourd dans le bas
Si le casier est eacutequipeacute de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de reacuteparer luniteacute en casier
WARNUNG Zur Vermeidung von Koumlrperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell muumlssen sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen daszlig das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewaumlhrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefuumlllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehoumlr geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten
333 Airflow The airflow through the encoder is critical for maintaining the proper temperature range Fans in the chassis draw air in through the front bezel and through the encoder The airflow ventilates out the right side (front view)
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 3 Installation Installing the Encoder in a Rack
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 23 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Do not obstruct the airflow of the encoder Severe equipment damage can result when the encoder cannot properly exhaust the airflow
334 Attaching the Rack Rails Attach the side-mount rack rails to the rack to hold the encoder in place Figure 3-1 illustrates the parts of the rack rails
Figure 3-1 Rack rails
To attach the rack rails to the rack
1 If needed place a Tinnermantrade speed nut with the nut on the outside of the rack over the holes to which you would like to mount the rails
NOTE Each of the four rack posts requires two speed nuts
2 Position the rack rails so the shelves are toward the inside of the rack
3 Using the 10 screws provided with the encoder screw the mounts into the speed nuts from the inside of the rack using the rack-mount holes that line up with the holes on the rack posts
Figure 3-2 illustrates attaching the rails
Figure 3-2 Attaching the rails to the rack
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 3 Installation Installing Encoder Software
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 24 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
CAUTION Make sure to install the rack rails with the shelf at the top of the rail If you install the rail upside down the rail blocks the encoder air vents which can result in overheating the encoder
335 Mounting the EncoderTo mount the encoder in a rack
1 Using both hands grasp the outside corners of the plastic front bezel and slowly pull to detach it from the encoder and expose the mount holes See Figure 3-3
2 Gently slide the encoder to rest on the rack rails
3 Push the encoder back until the rack-mount holes in the front of the encoder line up with the rack posts
4 Insert four screws through the mount holes in the front of the encoder through to the corresponding holes on the rack posts
5 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
6 Carefully replace the front bezel of the encoder making sure you do not damage the air filters
Rack-mount Holes
Front Bezel
Figure 3-3 Mounting the encoder
34 Installing Encoder SoftwareYour encoder comes from the factory with the latest released software version installed Harmonic periodically releases software updates You can download new software to the encoder using NMX See the NMX online help for instructions for how to download and begin running new encoder software
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 25 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
35 Cabling the Encoder CAUTION Do not make any cable connections when the power cord is connected You must unplug the power cable to turn off the encoder
The next sections describe how to connect the following cables
Audio input
Video input
IP output
Ethernet management
Power
351 Back PanelFigure 3-4 shows a sample back panel of the DiviCom DiviCom Electra 1000 encoder configured with AIC cards
AC Power
Fuse CoverAudio Input Cards
Digital Audio Input Ports
Fault andLocator LEDs
FaultRelayPort
EthernetManagement Port
EthernetOutput Ports
Plug Video Input PortsAnalog Audio Input Ports Expansion Slot
Figure 3-4 Back panel
352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables An encoder may have up to five audio input cards (AICs) each of which has two analog and two stereo digital audio ports
To connect the audio cables
Connect one of the following audio sources
Analog If you have an analog audio source connect the audio cable with the Phoenix 1881367 connector to the analog audio port and connect the other end to the audio source device On the encoder the analog ports are labeled ldquoANLG AUD1rdquo and ldquoANLG AUD2rdquo
Install the cable shield drain lug under the head of the AIC panel fastener screw
For cable building information refer to the pinout information in A32 Fault Relay Port on page 41
Digital If you have a digital audio source connect a coaxial cable with the BNC connector from the digital audio port to the audio source On the encoders the digital audio ports are labeled ldquoDGTL AUD1rdquo and ldquoDGTL AUD2rdquo
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 26 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
353 Connecting the Video Input Cables Your encoder has up to four video input ports The video input ports accept serial digital video To connect the video cables
1 Connect a coaxial cable with a BNC connector from the first video source to the Video 1 port on the encoder
2 Continue connecting the additional video sources to the remaining video ports
354 Connecting the IP Output Cables The encoder has one IP output port with two redundant channels and two RJ-45 connectors
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic must be a different network from your management network and must be configured with a different IP address
NOTE Harmonic recommends that shielded and grounded Ethernet cables be used on all Ethernet ports
To connect the IP output cables
1 Connect an Ethernet cable from the primary IP output port to a port on a network switch or router not a hub
2 Optionally connect the backup IP output port to a different switch or router to facilitate redundancy
3 Configure the Ethernet switch to support autonegotiation by setting each port to ldquoset speed autordquo and ldquoset duplex autordquo
NOTE Failure to properly configure the Ethernet switch could result in a mismatch between the IP output and the switch
Harmonic supports 101001000 Base-T and is fully compliant with IEEE 8023 8023u and 8023as standards
355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable The Ethernet management port allows communication between NMX and the encoder
To connect the Ethernet management cable
Connect an RJ-45UTP cable from the encoderrsquos back panel 10100 Base-T port to a port on an Ethernet switch
NOTE The network hosting the IP output traffic should be a different network from your management network
356 Connecting the AC Power The encoder AC power supply uses autosensing to adjust to different incoming voltages
CAUTION This product relies on the buildingrsquos electrical installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20 A US (240 VAC 20 A international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors)
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 3 Installation Cabling the Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 27 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
ATTENTION Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension) ce produit deacutepend de lrsquoinstallation eacutelectrique du local Veacuterifier qursquoun fusible ou qursquoun disjoncteur de 120 V alt 20 A US maximum (240 V alt 20 A international) est utiliseacute sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de charge)
WARNUNG Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen daszlig im Gebaumlude ein Kurzschluszlig-bzw Uumlberstromschutz installiert ist Stellen sie sicher daszlig eine Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V Wechselstrom 20 A (bzw in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom 20 A) an den Phasenleitern (allen stromfuumlhrenden Leitern) verwendet wird
To connect the power cord
Connect the power cord to the power plug on the encoder back panel and connect the power cord to the power outlet
CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socketoutlet is locatedinstalled near the equipment and is easily accessible
ATTENTION Le cordon drsquoalimentation est utiliseacute comme interrupteur geacuteneacuteral La prise de courant doit ecirctre situeacutee ou installeacutee agrave proximiteacute du mateacuteriel et ecirctre facile drsquoacceacutes
Das Netzkabel dient als Netzschalter Stellen sie sicher das die Steckdose einfach zugaumlnglich ist
357 Connecting the DC Power SupplyWARNUNG For instructions on how to connect the DC power supply see Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 28 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 4Operating the Encoder
After installing the encoder in a rack and connecting the cables as described in Chapter 3 Installation configure the encoder platform and services
The chapter describes
How to use NMX Digital Service Manager to configure the DiviCom Electra 1000
How to use the DiviCom Electra 1000 front panel
How to use the SAG Configuration Manager
41 Operating with NMX Digital Service ManagerWhen you use NMX Digital Service Manager to manage the encoders in your network you perform all encoder configuration including IP address assignment in NMX You do not need to do any configuration from the encoder front panel
See the NMX online help for instructions for adding an encoder to an NMX network group You will need to know the encoder MAC address when you add the encoder to a network group See 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address on page 30 for instructions for viewing the MAC address in the front panel display
42 Using the Front Panel You can perform some initial network configuration from the encoder front panel From the front panel you can set the encoderrsquos IP address default gateway and subnet mask and you can view the encoderrsquos MAC address and serial number
421 The Keypad The keypad on the local control panel provides the following functions
Access to the menus
Navigation through the menu hierarchies to their parameters
Editing capabilities
Figure 4-1 shows the keypad
Hot Keys Navigation andFunction Keys
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 4-1 Front panel keypad
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 29 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Seven hot keys provide immediate access to the encoder menus The Network and Help hot keys are currently active The other hot keys are reserved for future use
Navigation and function keys located to the right of the hot keys provide a tool for navigating through the menu hierarchies and changing parameter values Use the alphanumeric keys to enter new values
422 Front Panel Display
The two-line 20-character vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) shows the menus parameters and options As illustrated in Figure 4-2 line 1 of the local control panel display shows the menu path for the currently selected option To represent a path the VFD displays each submenu as two or more letters and a colon
Line 2 of the display shows the second line of a help message or a parameter value To change this value you must enter the new value using the keypad
NTWK Control IPParameter Requires
Value to be Edited
Value Setting
19216824101
Figure 4-2 Setting a value in the front panel display
A blinking cursor shows the current value A steady cursor shows the value being edited
Press the Help key to display an online message for the currently selected menu item
423 Setting the Encoder Network PropertiesBefore you can begin to configure the encoder you must set the encoder IP address subnet mask and default gateway The encoder ships with a default IP address based on the encoder serial number The default subnet mask is 255000 and the default gateway address is 10001
4231 Setting the IP Address
To set the encoder management port IP address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
The VFD display shows NTWK Configuration
2 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control IP
3 Press Enter
4 Enter the IP address using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and the 0 key
5 When you finish press Enter
Do not exit the Network menu because you can set the other properties from here
4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
To set the subnet mask
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 30 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
1 Press the
v key to navigate to NTWK Control Subnet
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the subnet mask using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
To set the gateway address
1 Press the
v
key to navigate to NTWK Gateway
2 Press Enter
3 Enter the default gateway using the alphanumeric keys
TIP To enter a period press the Shift key and press the 0 key
4 When you finish press Enter
5 Press Esc to exit the Network menu
424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address You can view the encoder MAC address from the front panel
To view the encoder MAC address
1 Press the NTWK hot key
2 Press the
v
key several times to navigate to NTWK Control MAC
The MAC address appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
425 Viewing the Encoder Serial NumberYou can view the encoder serial number from the front panel
To view the encoder serial number
1 Press the STAT hot key
2 Press the
v
key to navigate to STAT Serial Number
The serial number appears beneath the parameter name
3 Press Esc to exit the parameter
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 31 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
426 Using Configuration Manager
You can access Configuration Manager from any computer with network access to the encoder using Microsoft Internet Explorer 60 or later The Configuration Manager uses web browser cookies to maintain information
Use Configuration Manager to
Configure the encoder hardware including the network settings preferences and port properties
Configure the audio video VBI or Teletext DPI and PSI stream properties
Configure the output program and transport properties
View current and history alarms
View the error log
TIP You must set an IP address for the encoder before you can access Configuration Manager See 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties on page 29
4261 Preparing the Computer
Before starting Configuration Manager you might need to do some configuration on the computer you use to access the application
First you must set the Internet Explorer Privacy Level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Configuration Manager uses them to track information
NOTE This section applies to computers running Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Earlier versions of Windows do not include the pop-up blocker utility
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a utility that disables pop-up windows By default the utility disables pop-ups at a medium security level Because Configuration Manager uses pop-up windows in some configuration dialog boxes you must disable this utility or list the Ion IP address as a site that allows pop-ups
To change the pop-up window settings
1 Open Internet Explorer
2 From the Tools menu select Pop-up Blocker
If you do not see this menu item your version of Internet Explorer does not have this utility You can open Ion Configuration Manager
3 If you do have this menu item select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker to disable the utility or select Pop-up Blocker Settings to enable pop-ups for Configuration Manager
4 If you selected Pop-up Blocker Settings enter the Ion IP address in the text box under Address of Web site to allow
5 Click Add
The Ion IP address appears in the list of allowed web sites
6 Click Close
Additionally you must set the Internet Explorer privacy level to allow web browser cookies from the encoder as the Ion HTTP Configuration Manager uses them to track information See the Internet Explorer help to find information about how to allow cookies
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 32 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
4262 Opening Configuration Manager
To access Configuration Manager
1 Open Internet Explorer on a computer with network access to the encoder
Harmonic supports Internet Explorer 60 and later web browsers
2 In the Address field type the IP address of the encoder and press Enter
For example enter http1921682410
The following figure shows the (SAG) Configuration Manager
Figure 4-3 Configuration Manager Interface
Configuration Manager contains three panes
Header pane Across the top this pane provides information on alarms and errors The Rebuild PSI button calls the Rebuild PSI mechanism on the device Click the XML button to see XML output options information
Navigation pane Below the status pane on the left this pane has two sections The Platform section lists all cards installed on the devices The Output Services section lists all of the output streams (audio and video) Select an item in the Platform or Output Services pane to view its properties in the Configuration pane
Configuration Pane Besides the Navigation pane this is the place you can trigger actions on and information about items selected in the navigation pane Use this pane to apply configuration
You can resize any pane by dragging the border of the pane up down left or right
To begin configuring the encoder apply a template Templates contain basic settings for all encoder platform port and stream properties After applying a template customize the settings for your environment
Click the Help button in the Status pane for detailed instructions for configuring the encoder
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Using the Front Panel
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 33 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE On PCs running Windows NT 40 with Internet Explorer 60 do not leave Configuration Manager open for extended periods of time When Internet Explorer is left open and connected to the Configuration Manager URL the web page continuously refreshes the alarm status display for the device causing Internet Explorer to slowly increase its memory usage on the client PC While this increase in memory usage does not affect the encoder Harmonic does not recommend that Configuration Manager be open for long periods of time because it can affect other processes on the control PC
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 34 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Chapter 5Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter describes
How to maintain and replace the air filters and fuse
How to contact Harmonic Support
51 Air Filters The encoder uses two air filters to minimize dust and dirt in the circuitry and components in the chassis These filters are made of flexible compressed fiber spun from urethane foam Installed in the front of the encoder the filters are fire retardant and conform to UL 900 Class II specifications
The bezel filter is located inside the front bezel on the left side Figure 5-1 shows the dimensions of the bezel filter The notches on the left side and the cutouts in the middle can fit on either side of the front bezel mounting posts
532 inches
164 025 inchesinches
Figure 5-1 Bezel filter (front view)
The keypad filter is located behind the front panel keypad Figure 5-2 shows the keypad filter
645 inches
025 inches
164inches
Figure 5-2 Keypad filter (front view)
511 Maintaining the Air Filters The operating environment of the encoder plays a large factor in determining the life of the air filters Encoders that operate in dusty and dirty surroundings require more frequent inspections and filter cleaning than those operating in cleaner environments
Inspect and clean the filters with a frequency that is appropriate to the environment in which the encoder operates Harmonic recommends inspecting and cleaning the filters every six weeks to ensure proper airflow through the chassis
To clean dust and dirt from the filters you can use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dirt or you can rinse the filters in water You can also use soaps or mild detergents on the filters If you rinse the filters in water make sure that you squeeze the excess water from them before reinstalling them in the encoder You might need to order replacement filters if the filters become too dirty over time
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Air Filters
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 35 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters You do not need to turn off the encoder when removing and replacing the air filters
5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
To remove the front left filter from behind the front bezel
1 Grasp each side of the encoderrsquos front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
3 Remove the filter from inside the front bezel
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
NOTE When the filter is new its color is medium charcoal As dust and dirt collect in the porous filter material the filterrsquos color gradually changes to brown then an ash color
5 Replace the filter inside the front bezel Place the filter so that the long horizontal slot is at the bottom edge Carefully place the cutouts in the filter around the bezel mounting posts
6 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
To remove the air filter from behind the keypad
1 Grasp each side of the encoder front bezel with your hands
2 Carefully remove the front bezel by pulling it away from the encoder
Note the location of the filter The keypad is screwed onto the front of the encoder through four mounting posts Cutouts on the filter wrap around the four posts and the right side of the filter extends past the keyboard
3 Remove the filter by pulling the left side of the filter up and away from the keyboard mounting posts then pulling up the right side
4 Inspect the air filter for dirt and clean it if necessary
5 Replace the filter by inserting the right side of the filter behind the keypad with the vertical slots around the mounting posts
6 Insert the left side of the filter placing the horizontal cutouts around the mounting posts
7 Carefully replace the front bezel on the encoder making sure the filter does not fall out of the bezel
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fuse
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 36 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
52 Fuse Encoders with an AC power supply use a slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm The fuse is located on the back panel beside the power input A spare fuse is located in the fuse cover shown in Figure 5-3
Fuse cover
Figure 5-3 Fuse cover and AC power input
521 Replacing the FuseTo replace the fuse
1 Unplug the power cord from the chassis
DANGER You must disconnect the power cord before removing the fuse
2 Pull down the fuse cover on the back panel
3 Remove the old fuse
4 Install the new fuse
DANGER Always replace the fuse with a fuse of the same rating and type Using a different fuse voids the Harmonic warranty and could result in fire andor electrical damage
5 Replace the fuse cover
6 Plug in the encoder
53 Contacting Harmonic SupportThe Harmonic Customer and Technical Support groups are available to help you with any questions or problems you may have regarding Harmonic products
For assistance from within the US and Canada call toll free
1888MPEGTWO (6734896)
For assistance from outside the US and Canada call
14084906477
The fax number is 14084906770
The email address is techhelpharmonicinccom
The corporate address for Harmonic Inc is
Harmonic Inc 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Customer Support
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contacting Harmonic Support
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 37 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc are
Tel 18007881330 (from the US and Canada) Tel +14085422500 (outside the US and Canada) Fax+14084906708
The web address for Harmonic Inc is wwwharmonicinccom
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 38 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix AEncoder Specifications
This appendix contains a comprehensive list of the environment and physical characteristics of the encoder electrical specifications and information about the pinouts for the input and output ports
A1 Environment Specifications Table A-1 lists environment specifications for the encoder
Table A-1 Environment Specifications
Parameter Specification
Size 445 cm x 4826 cm x 6069 cm (175 in x 19 in x 24 in)
Weight 11 kg (24 lb)
AC Power
Input voltage range 85 to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC (autoselected)
Line frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 47 W per video encoder 188 W with 4 video encoders
Fuse Slow blow 40 A 250 V fuse 5 x 20 mm
DC Power
Nominal input ndash48 VDC
Input voltage range ndash40 to ndash60 VDC
Temperature
Operating 0 to 50 degC (32 to 122 degF)
Storage ndash20 to +80 degC (ndash4 to +176 degF)
Humidity
Operating lt 95 noncondensing
Storage lt 95 noncondensing
Altitude
Operating lt 15000 feet (4572 meters)
Storage lt 40000 feet (12192 meters)
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 39 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A2 Port Specifications Table A-2 lists the specifications for the back panel port connections For port locations see the illustration of the back panel on Figure 3-4 on page 25
Shock and Vibration
Packaged Passes the impact compression and vibration requirements of ASTM D4169-94 Distribution Cycle 13 Assurance Level 1
Operating Passes NEBS Office Vibration Test while operating (01G sine sweep 5 to 100 Hz 3 axis)
Table A-2 Port Specifications
Port Connection Specification
Video input port
Protocol Serial Digital Signal format per SMPTE 259M Data stream format per ITUR BT 601Composite Signal format per SMPTE 170M (NTSC or PAL) Data stream format per ITUR BT 470
Impedance 75 Ω unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Analog audio input
Input The number of digital stereo pairs varies with adapter used
Impedance 10K Ω
Mating connector type (connector on cable)
Phoenix 1881367
Digital audio input
Input Two analog or digital stereo pairs per AIC
Protocol AESEBU or SPDIF AESEBU signal format per AES3-2003 and ITU-R BS647-2
Impedance 75 Ω BNC unbalanced
Connector type BNC
Table A-1 Environment Specifications continued
Parameter Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 40 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A3 Port Pinouts The following sections describe the pinouts of the Ethernet management fault relay and analog audio input ports
A31 Ethernet Management Port The Ethernet management port is 10100 Base-T and uses an RJ-45UTP port to connect to an Ethernet network Use this port to manage the encoder with NMX See 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable on page 26 for cabling instructions
Table A-3 lists the pinouts for the RJ-45 Ethernet port
Table A-3 Ethernet Management Port Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Transmit data (TD) +
2 Transmit data (TD) ndash
3 Receive data (RD) +
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Receive data (RD) ndash
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
Ethernet management port
Type 10100 Base-T
Protocol 8023
Connector type RJ-45
Input serial port Reserved for future use
Ethernet output port
Type 101001000 Base-T
Protocol MPEG-2 over IP
Connector type RJ-45
Fault relay port Capable of switching 025 amps at 30 VDC
Mating connector type Phoenix 1881383
Table A-2 Port Specifications continued
Port Connection Specification
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 41 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A32 Fault Relay Port The fault relay port connects to a Form C relay that can switch up to 025 A at 30 VDC Table A-4 lists the fault relay pinouts
Table A-4 Fault Relay Port Pinout
Pin Connection
1 Normally closed (NC)
2 Normally open (NO)
3 Common (CM)
4 TTL -in1 (reserved for future use)
5 TTL -in2 (reserved for future use)
6 TTL -in3 (reserved for future use)
7 TTL -in4 (reserved for future use)
8 Ground (GND)
A33 Analog Audio Input Ports Each analog audio port uses a Phoenix 1881367 connector Table A-5 lists the cable connector pinouts
Table A-5 Analog Audio Port Pinout
Pin Description
1 Right +
2 Chassis Gnd
3 Right -
4 Left +
5 Chassis Gnd
6 Left -
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix A Encoder Specifications Port Pinouts
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 42 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed CaptioningIn order to use the included Evertzreg cable to support External 708 closed captioning some pinout adjustments must be made to the cable Table 5-1 describes the proper orientation
Table 5-1 Evertz Cable Pinout Arrangement
DB9 Connector HD15 Connector
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 2 Pin 6
NOTE Connect Pin 5 on both the DB9 and HD15 to shell Also short pins 7 and 8 on the DB9 connnector
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 43 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix BAudio and Video Specifications
B1 AIC FeaturesThe AIC adapter accepts analog (balanced or unbalanced) discrete AES3SPDIF digital and AES3 embedded in serial digital video inputs For analog and discrete AES3 inputs sampling frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz are supported Embedded digital is supported only for 48 kHz sampling which must be synchronous to the video
Table B-1 lists the AIC features for each coding mode including the supported sampling frequencies and ES bit rates
Table B-1 AIC Features
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
MPEG Layer II compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
64 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
MPEG Layer II compression SPPC (separate PID per channel)
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192
Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320
384 448a 512a 576a
640a
Stereo channel (20) 32 kHz 441 kHz 48 kHz
96 112 128 160 192
224 256 320 384 448a
512a 576a 640a
Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 16-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
56b 80b 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384
448a 512a 576a 640a
Up to 51 channels (32+LFE professional 32-bit mode)
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
256 320 384 448a 512a
576a 640a
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications AIC Features
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 44 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Note the following limitations
ATSC Standard A53 specifies that only 48 kHz sampling may be used and that ES bit rates must be less than or equal to 384 Kbps for a complete service It also specifies that a two-channel dialog-only service must be less than or equal to 192 Kbps Total ES rates for all services must be less than or equal to 512 Kbps
Embedded audio must be 48 kHz sampling and synchronous with the video See SMPTE 272M for definitions
MPEG AAC and HE AAC can be placed into the output Transport Stream encapsulated in either of two methods
ADTS
ADTS is an acronym for ldquoAudio Data Transport Streamrdquo This is the default used if the user selects MPEG-2 AACHE AAC ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F
LATMLOAS
LATM is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Transport Multiplexrdquo LOAS is an acronym for rdquoLow Overhead Audio Streamrdquo and furnishes an outer wrapper for LATMs inner wrapper of the raw audio Elementary Stream syntax MPEG-4 AAC and HE AAC bitstreams are encapsulated as LATMLOAS and assigned a stream type value of 0x11
Encapsulation mode is controlled by selecting rdquoMPEG-2rdquo or rdquoMPEG-4rdquo as required
MPEG HE AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128
MPEG AAC compression
Single channel (10) 32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
32 48 56 64 96 112 128 182 192
Dual channel (1+1) Stereo channel (20) Joint stereo channel
32 kHz441 kHz48 kHz
64 96 112 128 182 192 224 256 320 384
a These rates are not compliant with A53b These rates are valid for 10 coding only
Table B-1 AIC Features continued
AIC Feature Coding Mode SamplingFrequency
ES Bit RatesSupported (Kbps)
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 45 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B2 MPEG-1 Layer II AudioTable B-2 lists the bit rates in Kbps for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz This table is for MPEG-1 Layer II audio
Table B-2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
48 kHz441 kHz(analog only)
32 kHz(analog only)
32 418 384 348 418 384 348
48 522 576 557 522 576 557
56 627 672 627 627 672 627
64 731 672 696 731 768 696
80 836 864 836 940 864 905
96 1044 1056 1044 1044 1056 1044
112 1253 1151 1184 1253 1247 1184
128 1358 1343 1323 1358 1343 1393
160 1671 1727 1671 1671 1727 1671
192 1984 2015 2019 2089 2015 2019
224 2298 2303 2298 2402 2399 2367
256 2716 2687 2646 2716 2687 2646
320 3342 3359 3342 3342 3359 3342
384 3969 3934 3969 3969 4030 3969
B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio AIC-equipped encoders support native two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) compression
NOTE Harmonic supports Dolby Digital (AC-3) passthrough rates of 96 to 640 Kbps and native Dolby Digital (AC-3) rates of 56 to 640 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 46 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Table B-3 lists the bit rates for the sample frequencies of 48 kHz 441 kHz and 32 kHz
Table B-3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Bit Rates
Audio Bit Rate (Kbps)
Audio without PCR Audio with PCR
48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz 441 kHz 32 kHz
56 658 605 627 658 605 627
64 752 691 689 752 691 689
80 846 864 877 846 864 877
96 1034 1036 1003 1034 1036 1065
112 1222 1209 1191 1222 1209 1191
128 1316 1382 1316 1410 1382 1379
160 1692 1641 1692 1692 1727 1692
192 1974 1986 2005 2068 1986 2005
224 2350 2332 2319 2350 2332 2319
256 2632 2677 2632 2726 2677 2695
320 3290 3282 3321 3384 3368 3321
384 3948 3973 3948 4042 3973 3948
448 4606 4664 4637 4606 4664 4637
512 5264 5268 5264 5264 5268 5264
576 5922 5959 5891 5922 5959 5953
640 6580 6564 6580 6580 6564 6580
NOTE Changing from non-single-channel mode to single-channel mode provisions the transport bit rate automatically
When you change between single-channel and non-single-channel modes the encoder automatically provisions the bit rate to the closest available bit rate In some cases this means the bit rate is lower because provisioning does not increase the bit rate defined for the port Therefore changing the coding mode from non-single-channel mode to any of the four highest bit rates causes the encoder to provision the bit rate to 192 Kbps
In the case of the three lowest bit rates when you change from single-channel to non-single-channel mode because the bit rate is the lowest available the encoder provisions to the next highest available bit rate 64 Kbps If you set the bit rate to 80 Kbps and then change the coding mode to non-single-channel the encoder provisions the bit rate to 64 Kbps
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix B Audio and Video Specifications Video Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 47 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
B4 Video Specifications The encoder is equipped to handle serial digital (SDI) and analog composite inputs from 625-line (PAL) and 525- line (NTSC) video systems
Table 5-2 Video Specifications
Feature Hardware Specification Comments
Input formats Serial digital component and composite or analog composite
Either 625 lines (PAL) or 525 lines (NTSC)
Analog input level 1 V p-p nominal Factory calibrated
Analog input digitizing resolution
9 bits
SNR gt52 dB rms Unweighted
Frequency response gt ndash03 dBgt ndash05 dB
42 MHz55 MHz
Differential gain lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
Differential phase lt +ndash15 10 to 90 APL
When a PAL or NTSC analog composite input is used a high quality decoder converts the signal into ITU-R 601 digital format
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 48 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix CEncoder Back Panel Slot Locations
C1 Card Configurations for All EncodersFigure C-1 represents the back panel of an encoder Table C-1 shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in encoders that are not associated with a FLEX module Table C-2 shows the slot number and the modules associated with the FLEX module that can be installed NMX uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Video Ports
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 255
Figure C-1 Slot numbers
Table C-1 shows the cardsmodules software support and configuration recommendations for non-FLEX based encoders
Table C-1 Supported cardsmodules and configuration recommendations for this encoder
Card Slot Notes
AIC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-RAC Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
AHC-561 Any slot (1-5 cards per chassis)
ASI Output Slot 5 without a FLEX module Slot 2 with a FLEX module (1 card per chassis)
Only the first two ports are active and are electrical duplicates of each other
C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based EncodersTable C-2 lists the card configurations available for FLEX-based encoders
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
FLEX Slot 4 must be populated first slot 5 second (1-2 cards per chassis)
Requires CPC revision 105 or higher See Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information on page 49
GbE Slot 1 only (1 card per chassis) Used with FLEX module for input only
ASI Input Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use (1 card per chassis)
ASI input is currently only for FLEX module
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix C Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations Card Configurations for All Encoders
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 49 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
NOTE ASI Input modules (used with FLEX module) and ASI Output modules utilize the same hardware but perform different functions based on 1) the slot number and 2) if a FLEX module is installed If installed in slots 2 or 5 the ASI module is always an output If a FLEX module is installed an ASI module installed in slots 1 or 3 is an input
C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information1 From the Platform tab click on the Platform link
2 Click on the Control Board (CPC) link
The Control Board (CPC) Configuration page appears
3 Click on the Maintenance tab to examine the version information
RF 8VSB Slot 1 (typical) or slot 3 if slot 1 is already in use or slot 2 if slots 1 and 3 are already in use (1 card per chassis)
Used with FLEX module for input only
Table C-2 FLEX Module Options (for use with FLEX module)
Card Option Notes
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 50 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix DBoot Sequence
This appendix describes the encoder boot sequence including the messages that appear on the local control panel display
D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during BootupMessages on the local control panel indicate progress during boot-up During a successful boot many events occur so quickly you cannot see the messages The following sections describe the messages that you can see during boot attempts
NOTE During the boot sequence do not press any key on the keypad
The following sequence describes the display on the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) during a successful startup
Power on
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D2 Other Local Control Panel Display MessagesThe local control panel displays messages for other types of restarts including a system reset and loading new software
D21 Resetting the Encoder When you reset the encoder from NMX a message on the VFD shows that the encoder has been reset The encoder uses the boot file on the hard drive when you reset it
Reset from NMX
VFD line 1 = Bye bye VFD line 2 =
After power cycle
VFD line 1 = Harmonic Inc VFD line 2 = System Loading
Begin loading
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix D Boot Sequence Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 51 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
D22 Loading New Software You can download new software to an encoder using NMX After downloading the software restart the encoder to begin using the new software The following messages appear
Begin loading
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = System Loading
Booting
VFD line 1 =DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Loading xxxxxxxxelf
Finished
VFD line 1 = DiviCom Electra VFD line 2 = Multichannel Encoder
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 52 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix EWiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
If your encoder has the optional ndash48 VDC power supply follow these steps to wire the power supply Figure E-1 shows the DC power supply which is located on the back panel
Figure E-1 DC power supply
E1 Getting StartedBefore you begin wiring the ndash48 VDC power supply make sure that you provide the necessary overcurrent protection wires and power connector
E2 Power Source SpecificationsThe DC power source feeding the encoder must meet the following requirements
Electrically isolated from any AC power source
Positive ground The Positive bus of the DC power source must be reliably connected to the Ground bus
Each feed-pair must provide a continuous supply of power that meets the specifications shown in Table E-1
Table E-1 DC Power Source Requirements
Parameter Specification
Voltage 40 to 60 VDC
Max operating current 8 amps
Max input surge current 20 amps
E3 Overcurrent ProtectionTo provide overcurrent protection
Provide overcurrent protection devices as part of each rack housing encoders
Locate a readily accessible disconnect device between the DC power source and the encoder
Use a 10-amp double-pole fast trip DC-rated disconnect device for each DC power connector
NOTE Overcurrent protection devices must meet applicable national and local electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Wiring Requirements
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 53 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E4 Wiring RequirementsThe encoder is connected to the DC power source using three wires
ndashVin
GND
+Vin
Although Harmonic provides the power input connector with the NSG device you must supply the wires
The wires must comply with the specifications shown in Table E-2
Table E-2 DC Power Wire Requirements
Parameter Specification
Suitable conductor material Copper only
ndashVin and +Vin wires 16 AWG rating
Ground cable 16 AWG rating
Cable insulation rating Minimum 80 C low smoke fume (LSF) flame retardant
Cable type Must comply with at least one of the following standards
Branch circuit cable insulation color
Per applicable national electrical codes
Grounding cable color Green-yellow
E5 Power ConnectorThe encoder is supplied with a special DC power connector plug that matches the DC power socket on the back of the encoder
This connector is made by WAGO model number 231-103037-000
Use only the original connector for connecting the encoder to the DC power source Contact Harmonic Technical Support if you want to use any other type of connector
Figure E-2 shows the connector and its strain relief housing
Figure E-2 DC power connector
UL 1581 (VW-1) - UL style 1028 or equivalent EEE 383 EEE 1202-1991
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix E Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 54 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
E6 Assembling the DC Input Power CableTo assemble the DC input power cable
1 Prepare the power wires as specified in E4 Wiring Requirements on page 53
2 Use the disconnect device to make sure that the power supply from the DC power source to the cables is switched off
CAUTION Turn off the power before proceeding with these instructions
3 Unplug the WAGO power connector from the power socket on the encoder back panel
4 Identify the three wires coming from the DC power source that are used in the connection to the expansion unit
ndashVin
+Vin
GND
5 Strip up to 03 inches (8 mm) of insulation from each of the wires coming from the DC power source
Do not strip more than this length from each wire Stripping more leaves uninsulated wire exposed outside the DC connector after the assembly is complete
6 Insert a small screwdriver into the rectangular hole directly above the hole in the DC connector where you want to insert the first cable and press down on the screwdriver This opens the cage clamp for this section of the DC plug connector
NOTE WAGO also sells tools specifically designed to open cage clamps easily For more information either visit the WAGO web site at wwwwagocom or call WAGO at 1-800-346-7245 and request information about items 210-250 or 231-131
7 Feed the exposed section of the wire into the matching hole in the DC plug connector as shown in Figure E-3
Figure E-3 DC power connector detail
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other two wires to complete the assembly of the DC input cable
NOTE If you need to remove a wire from the DC plug connector insert a small screwdriver into the slot directly above the wire and press down on the screwdriver to free the wire from the cage clamp
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 55 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix FDiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
F1 IntroductionThe DiviCom FLEX decoding module delivers video decoding capability and is integrated into either the Electra or Ion encoder chassis The FLEX decoding module (hereafter refer to as the FLEX module) is a decoding module only (see Figure F-1) A single FLEX module is able to decode up to two (2) incoming channels and an appropriately configured encoder can deliver up to four (4) channels in a single rack-unit (1-RU) The FLEX module decodes MPEG-2 in both standard definition (SD) or high definition (HD) formats thereby eliminating the dependency on ingress formats The FLEX module is a unique gateway designed with the flexibility to deliver any type of pre-compressed video to any Electra 1000 5000 5400 7000 or Ion AVC SDHD encoder The FLEX module supports both ASI and IP inputs the most efficient interfaces used to route and transport pre-compressed video feeds
The FLEX module is controlled and configured with the NMX Digital Service Manager application or the Configuration Manager the SAG Web-based GUI The FLEX module also accepts decoded ATSC 8VSB signals from the DiviCom RF Input Card ( see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63) The FLEX module does not descramble or reconstruct all audio and ancillary data services (such as VBI) on the output port
NOTE The encoder chassis configuration must include an input module for IP The same GbE Pro card are used for both ProStream 1000 muxes and Electra encoders
Figure F-1 FLEX Module Ports
F2 Video Encoding Specifications Table F-1 describes video specifications supported by the FLEX module See the following tables for more information about video and audio compression
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Video Decoding MPEG-2 MPML MPEG-2 HPML VBR CBR
Aspect Ratios 43 and 169
Video Formats 480i2997 576i25 720P5994 720P50 1080i2997 and 1080i25
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Audio Pass Through Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 56 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F3 Audio Pass Through SpecificationsTable F-2 describes the audio pass through specifications FLEX module
Table F-2 Audio Pass-through Specifications
Feature Support
Number of channels Up to eight stereo PIDs per video service
Audio formats MPEG Layer II Dolby Digital (AC-3) AAC and HE AAC
Audio processing Pass-through
Operating modes Mono dual channel stereo joint stereo 51 multi-channel
F4 Ancillary Data SpecificationsA multichannel encoder equipped with FLEX is essentially receiving and outputting compressed streams Therefore the terminology used regarding ancillary data can be incorrect or misleading VBI data is not applicable to fully digital signals but is used by user habit The FLEX module does not re-create any of the ancillary data it simply passes it intact as packets of bits to the associate encoderrsquos TS output
Table F-3 describes the ancillary data specifications supported by the FLEX module
Table F-3 Ancillary Data Specifications
Feature Support
Vertical Interval Data Services (Pass through only)
WST (Teletext) Inverted WST WSS VPS AFD and bar data VITC Closed Captioning per CEA-608 and 708 AMOL and TV Guide data
Number of channels 4 PIDS
Additional features General HD decode and downcovert to SDIon AVC SD only Decode MPL3 (480i and 576i) Ion AVC HD only Decode HPL41 (720p 5060 and 1080i 5060)Ion SD Ion HD Electra 1000 and Electra 5000 only ASI input and output available with FLEX module (using
two ASI cards)
Table F-1 Video Specifications
Feature Support
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Input Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 57 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F5 Input SpecificationsTable F-4 describes the input specifications FLEX module
Table F-4 Input Specifications
Feature Support
Transport stream Inputs MPEG-2 TS
ASI interface (optional module)
Connector 4x BNC 75 Ω
MPEG format 188204 Bytes per TS packet
Processing 1 MPTSSPTS per port Up to 150 Mbps per port
ASI Ports 4
IP interface (optional module)
Type Gigabit Ethernet
IP ports 2 Independent ports
Connector 2 x SFP (multi mode single mode copper)
Speed 1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP encapsulation MPEG-2 TS over UDPIP 1 to 7 TS IP
MPEG format 188 Bytes per TS packet
MPEG-2 TS MPTS and SPTS
Maximum Bit-Rate per Socket
80 Mbps
Addressing Unicast and multicast
Management IGMP ARP and ICMP
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
The FLEX module supports SMTE 2022 Annex C forward error correction (FEC) FEC provides lost packet recovery at the receiving devices
RF Input Card
For specifics see DiviCom RF Input Card on page 63
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 58 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F6 Output SpecificationsTable F-5 describes the output specifications FLEX module
Table F-5 Outputs Specifications
Feature Support
Video Outputs One (1) per decoded channel with video only SDI or HD-SDI One (1) additional per channel for confidence monitoring only
Connector Type DIN 1023 (DIN 1023 to BNC adapters available)
Embedded Data along the Video
No Audio VBI VANC or HANC data embedded The data are embedded into the SDIHD-SDI output
F7 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
F8 Module SlotsThe diagram below represents the back panel of typical encoder The table shows the slot number and the modules that can be installed in that slot NMX or Configuration Manager uses the slot number to differentiate between cards of the same type within the encoder
Slot 2
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 4 FLEX
Main Board
Slot 5 FLEX
F9 Installing the Flex Decoding ModuleThis section describes how to install the Flex Decoding Module The modulersquos ports are shown in Figure F-1 on page 55
Ion and Electra encoders are typically ordered from the factory with the Flex module already installed However if additional Flex modules are installed installation of the Flex module in the field would be required
F901 ESD Safety Precautions
To protect modules from electrostatic discharge (ESD) follow these safety precautions
Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap whenever handling the modules
Keep the module inside the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the module in a chassis
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Cabling the FLEX Module
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 59 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F91 Installing a ModuleBefore installing the Flex module you may need to upgrade the software version on the encoder Contact Harmonic Customer Support to find out which software version you need to install the additional module
There is also a CPC limitation of requiring that requires version 105
NOTE Before installing the FLEX module make sure that the encoder has the appropriate software version installed before installing the module using either NMX or SAG
NOTE The FLEX module must be installed in slot 4 (and an optional second module in slot 5) of the encoder
You need a Phillipstrade screwdriver to install the Flex module
To install the Flex module
1 Turn off the encoder in which you are installing the module
2 Remove the protective covers from slots 1 through 5 where you are going to install the module (by loosening the two screws with the Phillips screwdriver)
Save the cover for future use
3 While wearing an ESD wrist strap unpack the module from its antistatic protective packing material
CAUTION Unpack and handle the module away from electric motors transformers and other similar machinery
4 Slide the module onto the encoder by lining up the edges of the module with the slots in the chassis
Make sure that the FLEX module goes into the encoder smoothly without binding or scraping other modules The modules should slide easily until you feel the module engage the internal connector and the module is flush with the back of the encoder Do not force the module
5 Tighten the two screws with the screwdriver
NOTE Refer to the encoder guide or online help for information about accommodating the new Flex module in the encoderrsquos configuration
F10 Cabling the FLEX ModuleThis section describes how to cable the FLEX module Cabling the FLEX module is very straight forward All video and monitor ports are clearly marked The following table lists the ports and required connectors
NOTE Video ports can either be used for loopback or confidence monitoring
Each firmware license ships with two video loopback cables An optional adapter cable can be purchased for use with the monitoring ports You must also have an IP input module installed Figure F-3 on page 61 provides additional information on understanding the encoderrsquos LED color values
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 60 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios This section describes two recommended re-encode chassis scenarios 2- Channel and 4-Channel scenarios
F111 2 - ChannelFigure F-1 on page 55 illustrates a typical 2-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 2-channel encoder chassis Table F-6 describes the port and cable associations
Table F-6 Port and Cable Assignments (2-channel)
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
IP Module
Audio Module
Audio Module
Flex Module
Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
NOTE For the monitor ports there is a DIN to BNC pigtail connector that can be ordered Harmonic Part number FLEX-MON 229-0054067
NOTE The FLEX module must use slot 4
Figure F-2 2 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 61 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-3 describes the LED colors and what they represent
720p
Figure F-3 LED Color Chart
F112 4 - ChannelFigure F-4 illustrates a typical 4-channel re-encode chassis cabling assignment This scenario makes use of a base 4-channel encoder chassis
Table F-7 Port and Cable Assignments
Port Description Connector
Video 1 75 Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 1 75 Ω cable This output port is used for the loopback cable that feeds an encoder
DIN 1023
Video 2 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Monitor 2 75 Ω cable The second output port can be used as a monitoring and troubleshooting purposes
DIN 1023
Video 3 75Ω cable DIN 1023
Video 4 75Ω cable DIN 1023
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
IP Module Audio Module Attaches to optional SDI monitor (video only)
Audio Module Flex Module
Appendix F DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 62 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Figure F-4 4 - Channel Re-Encode Chassis Scenario
F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMXRefer to the NMX online help system for configuring a FLEX module for use in your NMX Digital Service Manager application
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 63 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
Appendix GDiviCom RF Input Card
This appendix contains specifications for the DiviCom RF Input Card
The RF Input Card is a four channel ATSC 8VSB receiver It receives four independent ATSC 8VSB signals on its inputs and outputs four MPEG-2 Transport Streams over the chassis internal bus to one or more FLEX decoding modules The RF Input Card does not support analog demodulation
The RF Input Card can be managed by either NMX or SAG Figure G-1 on page 63shows a diagram of the rear panel
Figure G-1 RF Input card
The LED lights show status as shown in Table G-1 on page 63
Table G-1 LED status lights
Display Status
Off Port disabled
Blinking Yellow Loss of synch
Red Packet error rate (PER) threshold exceeded
Steady yellow SNR below threshold
Green Port Enabled no alarms
G1 RF SpecificationsThe RF specifications for the card are listed below
VSB Input 4 Type lsquoFrsquo connectors per IEC 60169-24
Tuning Range VHFUHF (Channels 2-59)
NOTE Tuning range is limited to Channels 2 to 59 by software (and SCTE 02-2006) per the FCCIndustry Canada decisions to release channels 60 to 69 for public safety use
Sensitivity --83 dBm6 MHz
Dynamic Range gt 80dB
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Appendix G DiviCom RF Input Card Output Specifications
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 64 Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
G2 Output SpecificationsThe output specification for the card is
Four MPEG-2 Transport Streams per ATSC A53 Part 3 and ISOIEC 13818-1
G3 Environmental and Physical Compliant with ROHS Directive 200295EC Refer to the encoder environmental specifications for additional information
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 65 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
AAC power supply
connecting 26overview 17
agency approvals 4air filters 34 to 35airflow 22alphanumeric keys 28analog audio
connecting 25port specifications 39
analog audio input ports 18analog audio port
pinout 41audio cables connecting 25audio compression rates described 46audio encoding features 13audio input ports 17
Bback panel
audio input ports 17described 17Ethernet management port 19 40fault relay port 19fuse 17IP output port 19LEDs 19port specifications 39serial data port 19video input ports 18
boot sequence 50
Ccabling the encoder 25compliance and approval 2connecting
analog audio ports 25audio input cables 25DC power supply 52digital audio ports 25Ethernet management cable 26IP output cables 26video input cables 26
connections FCC compliance 2connectors
AC power 17analog audio input 39digital audio input 17 39Ethernet 19 40fault relay 41IP output 19RJ-45 19 40video 39
cTUVus North American safety approval 4
DDC power supply 17 52digital audio
connecting 25port specifications 39ports 17
digital program insertion 14display front panel 29DiviTrack IP 14Dolby Digital AC-3 bit rates 45DPI 14
Eenvironmental specifications 38Ethernet management port
connecting cable 26described 19specifications 40
European EMIEMC approvals 4
Ffault relay port 19 41FCC compliance 2features
audio encoding 13general 10video encoding 12
filters See air filters 34front bezel 15
removing 24front panel 15 28front panel display 29function keys 28fuse 36
Hhardware specifications 38Harmonic equipment modifying 2help displaying on VFD 29hot keys 28
Iinput ports 17installing the encoder 21Ion Configuration Manager
accessing 32overview 31
IP output portconnecting cables 26described 19
Kkeypad 28
LLEDs
audio port 20back panel 19front panel 16video port 20
loading new software 51local control panel
described 15display 29
Index
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Index
copy 2009 Harmonic Inc 66 DiviCom Electra 1000 Version 30 Rev E
MMAC address viewing 30maintaining air filters 34maintaining fuse 36
Nnavigation keys 28North American EMI approvals 4North American Safety approvals 4
Ooutput port IP 19 26
Ppinouts
analog audio port 41pinouts port 40port specifications 39ports
analog audio input 18audio input 17Ethernet management 19fault relay 19IP output 19serial data 19video input 18
power supplyAC 26DC 52specifications 38
Rrack mounting 21rack rails attaching 23rack-mount kit 21replacing air filters 35resetting the encoder 50RJ-45 connectors 19 40
Sserial data port 19specifications
environment 38fuse 38hardware 38input and output 39port 39power supply 38video 47
standards and approvals 4
TTUV European safety approval 4
Uunpacking the encoder 21
VVFD
display during boot 50paths represented 29
video encoding features 12video input ports
connecting cables 26description 18LEDs 20
video specifications 47
WWEEE compliance 2
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-
Harmonic Inc549 Baltic WaySunnyvale CA 94089 USAT +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708
wwwharmonicinccom
copy Copyright 2009 Harmonic Inc All rights reserved Manual Part No MAN-ELECTRA1000-30
- Installation Guide
-
- Table of Contents
- Preface
-
- 11 Manual Organization
-
- Introduction
-
- 21 Operating Environment
- 22 General Features
- 23 Video Encoding Features
- 24 Audio Encoding Features
- 25 DiviTrackIP Support
- 26 Digital Program Insertion Support
- 27 Audio Mode Change Control Through VANC
- 28 Closed Captions Support
-
- 281 Japanese Standard Closed-Captions Support
- 282 ARIB B-37 Captions
-
- 29 Front Panel
-
- 291 Front Bezel
- 292 Local Control Panel
- 293 LEDs
- 294 Modes of Operation
-
- 2941 Default Mode
- 2942 Verbose Front Panel
- 2943 NMX Control Over Second Line
-
- 210 Back Panel
-
- 2101 AC Power and Fuse
- 2102 DC Power and Fuse
- 2103 Audio Input Ports
-
- 21031 Analog Audio Input Ports
- 21032 Digital Audio Input Ports
-
- 2104 Video Input Ports
- 2105 IP Output Port
- 2106 Ethernet Management Port
- 2107 Fault Relay Port
- 2108 Serial Data Port
-
- 211 Back Panel LEDs
-
- 2111 Main Board LEDs
- 2112 Video Lock LEDs
- 2113 Audio Port LEDs
-
- Installation
-
- 31 Preparation
- 32 Unpacking
- 33 Installing the Encoder in a Rack
-
- 331 Rack Guidelines
- 332 Chassis Warnings for Rack Mounting and Servicing
- 333 Airflow
- 334 Attaching the Rack Rails
- 335 Mounting the Encoder
-
- 34 Installing Encoder Software
- 35 Cabling the Encoder
-
- 351 Back Panel
- 352 Connecting the Audio Input Cables
- 353 Connecting the Video Input Cables
- 354 Connecting the IP Output Cables
- 355 Connecting the Ethernet Management Cable
- 356 Connecting the AC Power
- 357 Connecting the DC Power Supply
-
- Operating the Encoder
-
- 41 Operating with NMX Digital Service Manager
- 42 Using the Front Panel
-
- 421 The Keypad
- 422 Front Panel Display
- 423 Setting the Encoder Network Properties
-
- 4231 Setting the IP Address
- 4232 Setting the Subnet Mask
- 4233 Setting the Default Gateway Address
-
- 424 Viewing the Encoder MAC Address
- 425 Viewing the Encoder Serial Number
- 426 Using Configuration Manager
-
- 4261 Preparing the Computer
- 4262 Opening Configuration Manager
-
- Maintenance and Troubleshooting
-
- 51 Air Filters
-
- 511 Maintaining the Air Filters
- 512 Removing and Replacing the Air Filters
-
- 5121 Removing and Replacing the Bezel Filter
- 5122 Removing and Replacing the Keypad Filter
-
- 52 Fuse
-
- 521 Replacing the Fuse
-
- 53 Contacting Harmonic Support
-
- Encoder Specifications
-
- A1 Environment Specifications
- A2 Port Specifications
- A3 Port Pinouts
-
- A31 Ethernet Management Port
- A32 Fault Relay Port
- A33 Analog Audio Input Ports
- A34 Cable Pinouts and External 708 Closed Captioning
-
- Audio and Video Specifications
-
- B1 AIC Features
- B2 MPEG-1 Layer II Audio
- B3 Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
- B4 Video Specifications
-
- Encoder Back Panel Slot Locations
-
- C1 Card Configurations for All Encoders
-
- C11 Additional Card Configurations for FLEX-based Encoders
- C12 Using SAG to View the Control Board (CPC) Revision Information
-
- Boot Sequence
-
- D1 Local Control Panel Display Messages during Bootup
- D2 Other Local Control Panel Display Messages
-
- D21 Resetting the Encoder
- D22 Loading New Software
-
- Wiring the ndash48 VDC Power Supply
-
- E1 Getting Started
- E2 Power Source Specifications
- E3 Overcurrent Protection
- E4 Wiring Requirements
- E5 Power Connector
- E6 Assembling the DC Input Power Cable
-
- DiviComtrade FLEX Decoding Module
-
- F1 Introduction
- F2 Video Encoding Specifications
- F3 Audio Pass Through Specifications
- F4 Ancillary Data Specifications
- F5 Input Specifications
- F6 Output Specifications
- F7 Environmental and Physical
- F8 Module Slots
- F9 Installing the Flex Decoding Module
-
- F901 ESD Safety Precautions
- F91 Installing a Module
-
- F10 Cabling the FLEX Module
- F11 Re-Encode Chassis Scenarios
-
- F111 2 - Channel
- F112 4 - Channel
-
- F12 Configuring the FLEX Module in NMX
-
- DiviCom RF Input Card
-
- G1 RF Specifications
- G2 Output Specifications
- G3 Environmental and Physical
-
- Index
-